for domain administrators of distributors - email …4.2.3.4 create your outgoing email promotional...
TRANSCRIPT
April 14 2014
Mail Control Center For Domain Administrators of Distributors Version 255 Client Services
Table of Contents
copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 2 -
Mail Control Center 1
1 Preface 4
11 Intended audience 4
12 Overview 4
2 The Control Center 4
21 Accessing the Control Center 4 22 Control Center Login Credentials 5
23 Control Center Password 5
3 The Home Page 5
4 Customization 6
41 Customize with Themes 6 42 Advance Customization 6
421 Template 6 422 Colors amp Fonts 7 423 Text amp Links 9 424 Images amp Backgrounds 14 425 Rotating Banner Ad 18 426 Sign up Link 19 427 Default Web Mail Preferences 19 428 Report Spam 19 429 Quota Warning Letter 20 4210 Welcome Letter 21 4211 Calendar 22 4212 Navigation Buttons 22
43 Email Rules 23 431 SpamShield Score 23 432 Email Rules 24 433 ApprovedBlocked Senders 26 434 ApprovedBlocked Networks 27 435 Order of Rules 27
5 Manage Users 29
51 List User Accounts 29 511 To search under first name last name or login name 30 512 To search using the shortcut menu 30 513 Manage User Accounts Results 30 514 Search user accounts 31 515 Edit a user account 31 516 Change a user password 31 517 Delete a user 31 518 Suspend a user 31 519 Un-suspend a user 32 5110 Restricted User 32 5111 Restoring Deleted User 32 5112 Blocked User 33
52 Create Users 38 521 To create a single user account 38 522 Batch Process 38
53 Recover users 38
54 Send Email to all users 39 55 Manage Email Aliases 40
Table of Contents
copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -
551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41
56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41
57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42
58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43
59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44
510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46
511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47
512 Reserve Login Name 47
6 Account Summary 47
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47
71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48
72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48
73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48
74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -
1 Preface
11 Intended audience
This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service
12 Overview
This document is divided into the following sections
The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify
accounts on a specific domain
The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and
feel of your Web Mail and email service
Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts
Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service
2 The Control Center
The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information
21 Accessing the Control Center
The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control
Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -
22 Control Center Login Credentials
The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you
access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)
If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information
23 Control Center Password
The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated
password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center
3 The Home Page
The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Table of Contents
copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 2 -
Mail Control Center 1
1 Preface 4
11 Intended audience 4
12 Overview 4
2 The Control Center 4
21 Accessing the Control Center 4 22 Control Center Login Credentials 5
23 Control Center Password 5
3 The Home Page 5
4 Customization 6
41 Customize with Themes 6 42 Advance Customization 6
421 Template 6 422 Colors amp Fonts 7 423 Text amp Links 9 424 Images amp Backgrounds 14 425 Rotating Banner Ad 18 426 Sign up Link 19 427 Default Web Mail Preferences 19 428 Report Spam 19 429 Quota Warning Letter 20 4210 Welcome Letter 21 4211 Calendar 22 4212 Navigation Buttons 22
43 Email Rules 23 431 SpamShield Score 23 432 Email Rules 24 433 ApprovedBlocked Senders 26 434 ApprovedBlocked Networks 27 435 Order of Rules 27
5 Manage Users 29
51 List User Accounts 29 511 To search under first name last name or login name 30 512 To search using the shortcut menu 30 513 Manage User Accounts Results 30 514 Search user accounts 31 515 Edit a user account 31 516 Change a user password 31 517 Delete a user 31 518 Suspend a user 31 519 Un-suspend a user 32 5110 Restricted User 32 5111 Restoring Deleted User 32 5112 Blocked User 33
52 Create Users 38 521 To create a single user account 38 522 Batch Process 38
53 Recover users 38
54 Send Email to all users 39 55 Manage Email Aliases 40
Table of Contents
copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -
551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41
56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41
57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42
58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43
59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44
510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46
511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47
512 Reserve Login Name 47
6 Account Summary 47
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47
71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48
72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48
73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48
74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -
1 Preface
11 Intended audience
This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service
12 Overview
This document is divided into the following sections
The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify
accounts on a specific domain
The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and
feel of your Web Mail and email service
Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts
Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service
2 The Control Center
The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information
21 Accessing the Control Center
The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control
Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -
22 Control Center Login Credentials
The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you
access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)
If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information
23 Control Center Password
The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated
password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center
3 The Home Page
The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Table of Contents
copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -
551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41
56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41
57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42
58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43
59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44
510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46
511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47
512 Reserve Login Name 47
6 Account Summary 47
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47
71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48
72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48
73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48
74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -
1 Preface
11 Intended audience
This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service
12 Overview
This document is divided into the following sections
The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify
accounts on a specific domain
The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and
feel of your Web Mail and email service
Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts
Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service
2 The Control Center
The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information
21 Accessing the Control Center
The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control
Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -
22 Control Center Login Credentials
The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you
access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)
If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information
23 Control Center Password
The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated
password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center
3 The Home Page
The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -
1 Preface
11 Intended audience
This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service
12 Overview
This document is divided into the following sections
The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify
accounts on a specific domain
The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and
feel of your Web Mail and email service
Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts
Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service
2 The Control Center
The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information
21 Accessing the Control Center
The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control
Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -
22 Control Center Login Credentials
The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you
access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)
If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information
23 Control Center Password
The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated
password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center
3 The Home Page
The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -
22 Control Center Login Credentials
The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you
access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)
If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information
23 Control Center Password
The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated
password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center
3 The Home Page
The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -
4 Customization
Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features
found under the Manage Services gt Customization section
Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control
center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new
domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor
41 Customize with Themes
Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes
To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to
the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)
1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
42 Advance Customization
You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface
421 Template
There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and
email service login pages
To select a Template for Classic Web Mail
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
To select a Template for the Web Mail login page
1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template
2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any
customizations you have made)
3 Click on Finish when done
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -
422 Colors amp Fonts
Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select
the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only
4221 Select a Font Setting
To select a font setting
1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu
2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -
3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the
palette
4 Click Submit to save your changes
4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars
The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which
can be customized to be the same or different color
To change text links and navigation bar colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors
Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars
To change primary and secondary bar and font colors
1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette
2 Click Submit to save your changes
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -
423 Text amp Links
Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section
Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account
the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center
4231 Enter your site name
The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login
and Logout page
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -
4232 Enter the page title
The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -
4233 Enter the address your services will link back to
The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to
this URL when they click on these links
4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature
You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent
by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed
Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service
4235 Create your login page message
You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -
4236 Create your welcome page message
You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is
allowed
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is
highlighted by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -
4237 Create your copyright message
You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is
allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum
height
Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -
4238 Help Link
The help link in web mail can be adjusted here
1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link
424 Images amp Backgrounds
In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages
4241 Display your logo
This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center
for all domains
4242 Display your login logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -
When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
This is where the logo will appear in web mail
4243 Large logo background color
If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large
logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or
selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
4244 Display your Classic Interface logo
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -
You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no
larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic
Web Mail interface
Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is
displayed in Web Mail
4245 Customize the Classic interface background
You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also
select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from
the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background
color
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -
4246 Stationery
Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits
on the amount you may offer
We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in
mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K
To add Stationery
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Enter the name of the image
3 Click Submit
42461 Stationery not available
An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons
42462 Stationery available
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -
The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above
425 Rotating Banner Ad
A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be
displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can
display one banner or rotate multiple banners
The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find
an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code
enter it into to the field provided
To add your Rotating Banner code
1 Go to the Manage Services page
2 Select Advance Option
3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad
4 Enter the code into the field provided
Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and
pasting it into the field at the end of the page
To preview your Rotating Banner selections
1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your
selections by clicking the Submit Preview button
2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review
3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center
To display one banner
1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag
Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local
drive For example
ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt
ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt
To display multiple banners or rotate banners
1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the
HTML source code of your website pages
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -
426 Sign up Link
Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee
4261 High Risk
If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons
427 Default Web Mail Preferences
You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have
these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail
Default Time Zone
Default Time Format
Default Date Format
Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message
Action to be taken after sending a message
Auto Save to Draft enable or disable
Auto Complete enable or disable
Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline
Text Editor using rich or plain text editor
Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size
Webmail Interface enable or disable
Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable
NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these
settings Only new users will inherit these defaults
428 Report Spam
When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web
However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -
1 Web Mail
a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client
a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work
b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file
429 Quota Warning Letter
4291 Email Quota Warning Letter
You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated
automatically
4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter
You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically
4293 How to create quota warning letter
To create a quota warning letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4210 Welcome Letter
You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear
as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end
users across all of your domains
To create a welcome letter
1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service
2 Enter the Subject
3 Enter your message
4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format
5 Click on Submit to save your changes
Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -
It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done
4211 Calendar
In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the
radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference
Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature
4212 Navigation Buttons
You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of
buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes
for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -
42121 System buttons
To select a button style
1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice
2 Click Submit
42122 Customized buttons
To upload your own buttons
First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images
1 Browse or enter the location of the image
2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing
3 Click Submit
43 Email Rules
Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain
431 SpamShield Score
SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25
A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam
A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam
A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam
A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs
In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please
keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting
To adjust the SpamShield Score setting
1 Log into your Control Center
2 Select Manage Services
3 Click on Email Rules
4 Select Spam Shield Score
5 Enable the filter by checking the box
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -
6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu
7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu
8 Click OK to save your changes
432 Email Rules
Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block
messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the
INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the
first condition to be in the INBOX has been met
Inbound Email Rules
Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules
Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the
service
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -
4321 To create a rule
1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save
4322 To edit a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4323 To enabledisable a rule
1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
4324 To remove a rule
1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -
433 ApprovedBlocked Senders
The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email
address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)
Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered
to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address
or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined
approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail
You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4331 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button
4332 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -
434 ApprovedBlocked Networks
The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)
Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list
4341 To add an entry
1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks
2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network
3 Click the Add button
4 Click the Save Changes button
4342 To remove an entry
1 Select the entry from the list
2 Click the Remove button
3 Click the Save Changes button
435 Order of Rules
Here is the order in which the email rules process
1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)
2 Approved Networks
3 Approved Senders
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -
4 Blocked Networks
5 Blocked Senders
6 SpamShield Score
7 Email Rules
It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -
5 Manage Users
The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section
51 List User Accounts
Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many
quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -
511 To search under first name last name or login name
1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the
appropriate fields
2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information
512 To search using the shortcut menu
You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please
keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base
Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom
of the page
Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are
List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to
prevent others from signing up for these names
List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent
to the address to an email box or distribution list
List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access
List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become
compromised andor has abused our terms of service
List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed
513 Manage User Accounts Results
When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -
514 Search user accounts
You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen
To search using filters
1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu
2 The page will refresh with the specified results
515 Edit a user account
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information
3 Modify the end user information
4 Click on Save to submit your changes
516 Change a user password
1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account
Type column
2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password
3 Set the new password
a See the create user section for the password policy
b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text
field
4 Confirm the new password
5 Click on Save to submit your changes
Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before
submitting your changes
517 Delete a user
To delete a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Delete button
Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days
Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable
518 Suspend a user
As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will
no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any
email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification
response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact
Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account
To suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Suspend button
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -
519 Un-suspend a user
5191 To un-suspend a user
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on the Un-suspend button
5192 Unable to un-suspend a user
In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the
terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted
or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended
5110 Restricted User
A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support
for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction
5111 Restoring Deleted User
Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user
51111 Using the Create User function
Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration
Same username (data from an account is based on the username)
The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below
If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -
Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion
51112 Recover Users option
See the section below regarding this feature
5112 Blocked User
This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as
spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming
we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts
Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)
Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP
reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en
Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a
very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to
automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it
abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of
the largest issues we face
Current limitation and Support
Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the
future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this
examined
Control Center Updates
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -
Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more
information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the
List User accounts section
Under 5000 users
As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu
You can simply look at your blocked users through this link
Over 5000 users
You will need to search by the log-in name (username)
New Information
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -
We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more
information
NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view
Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user
Status
This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of
suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However
we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how
many times the account was blocked
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -
Blocked Date
The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more
important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most
recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -
When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -
Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address
We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the
message would be the last part of the raw message information
For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is
too much HTML
Unblocking User
To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order
From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo
Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to
DELETE a user
Select the check box next to the username
If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked
Press the lsquoGorsquo button
52 Create Users
521 To create a single user account
1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy
a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character
f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt
g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address
Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit
522 Batch Process
Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner
53 Recover users
The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -
Select the user then press the recover button
You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page
54 Send Email to all users
As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send
email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing
To send a mass email to your users
1 Select Manage Users
2 Click on Send Mail
3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain
4 Enter the Subject
5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII
characters in any field will cause delivery to fail
6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in
HTML formatrdquo
7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending
8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message
Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -
55 Manage Email Aliases
An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email
addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not
an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received
using an email alias
551 Create a New Email Alias
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link
3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email
4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time
Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias
5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to
Multiple addresses must be separated by commas
6 Click Submit
552 ListEditDelete Aliases
5521 To list email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
5522 To edit email aliases
You may only edit the distribution list
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account
4 Modify the distribution list
5 Click on Submit
NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank
alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias
5523 To delete email aliases
1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases
2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link
3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next
4 Click Submit
Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -
553 Alias Administrator Email Address
Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization
56 Require use of SSL
The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL
Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional
561 To enable SSL as required
1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL
2 Select one of six options
a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet
system
b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are
mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only
c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web
browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the
entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail
d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users
log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet
domain
e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this
manner
f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the
Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the
web mail session
3 Click on Submit
57 Expire User Passwords
To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or
immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in
order to access email and other services again
Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In
addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -
571 Expire User Passwords
From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date
30 days
60 days
90 days
180 days
1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled
572 Expire Users Passwords Now
We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be
forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot
undo this setting
573 To change expired passwords
1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password
2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -
58 Batch Process Accounts
This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors
581 Import
The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users
5811 Domains
Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created
5812 Users
If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue
582 Update Passwords
As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords
583 Deleting Users
If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing
584 Do not encrypt passwords
Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -
59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync
591 Using one_sync
The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml
592 Control Center function
From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)
An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain
510 Mobile device service one_mobile
5101 Functionality
The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service
Contacts
Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -
5102 Control Center function
The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe
Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely
51021 Self-Service
This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center
51022 Remote Wipe
Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings
1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account
2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button
4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be
undone
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -
5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset
6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects
Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need
to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where
needed
5103 Server Name
An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled
511 User Alerts
This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it
5111 Setting the Alert
Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert
Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -
Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated
5112 Disabling the alert
If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications
5113 Notify more than one person
Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people
512 Reserve Login Name
A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent
others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email
accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a
limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create
To create a Reserve Login Name
1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name
2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma
3 Click on Submit
To delete a Reserve Login Name
1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user
2 Click on Delete
6 Account Summary
The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required
The information here is only pertinent to the admin
7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support
Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -
71 Support
711 On-line Information
You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet
In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi
712 Contacting Support
You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information
72 Increasing the storage capacity
The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire
domain or individual users
721 Domain level
This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features
722 User level
This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section
NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features
73 Changing the Web Mail Address
731 Initial Set-up
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and
ensure that the CNAME record has been created
732 Mistake made
If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support
Mail Control Center User Guide
copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -
74 Changing Email Address
Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different
URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL
and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created
75 Batch Process Accounts
The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the
domain For further information please contact support